Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2020 COMPASS
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2020 COMPASS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................75
4 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 100
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 162
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 227
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 267
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................310
9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 316
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 401
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ 405
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL.................................. 9
Essential Information .................................... 9
Symbols .......................................................... 9
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............11
KEYS ......................................................................12
Key Fobs ......................................................12
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................16
Vehicle On Message ................................... 17
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....18
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ... 18
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped.. 18
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle................................................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ..................................................19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 20
General Information ....................................20
SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 20
Replacement Keys ...................................... 21
Key Programming ....................................... 21
General Information .................................... 21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .... 22
To Arm The System ..................................... 22
To Disarm The System ............................... 23
Rearming Of The System............................. 23
Security System Manual Override .............. 23
DOORS................................................................... 23
Manual Door Locks...................................... 23
Power Door Locks........................................ 24
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry........... 24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................ 28
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ................................................... 28
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ......28
Programming The Memory Feature............ 29
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 29
Memory Position Recall............................... 30
SEATS .................................................................... 30
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 30
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 32
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 33
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped.............. 35
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped......... 36
HEAD RESTRAINTS...............................................36
Front Head Restraint Adjustment............... 36
Rear Head Restraints.................................. 37
STEERING WHEEL ...............................................38
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 38
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 38
MIRRORS ..............................................................39
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped....... 39
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped ......... 39
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 40
Power Adjustment Mirrors .......................... 40
Folding Mirrors............................................. 40
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 41
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................... 41
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................42
Multifunction Lever .................................... 42
Headlight Switch.......................................... 42
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped................................................... 42
High/Low Beam Switch .............................. 42
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped................................................... 42
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 43
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 43
Headlight Time Delay .................................. 43
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 43
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................. 44
Turn Signals ................................................ 44
Lane Change Assist .................................... 44
Battery Saver Feature ................................. 44
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................45
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............46
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 46
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 47
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 47
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped .... 48
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................48
Manual Climate Control Overview ............. 48
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 52
Climate Control Functions........................... 58
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......58
Operating Tips ............................................. 59
WINDOWS ............................................................60
Power Window Controls............................... 60
Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 61
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection .....................................................61
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................61
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 62
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 62
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................62
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 63
Opening Sunroof — Vent.............................. 63
Closing Sunroof............................................ 64
Opening Power Shade .................................64
Closing Power Shade...................................64
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 65
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 65
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 65
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 65
HOOD ..................................................................... 65
Opening The Hood ....................................... 65
Closing The Hood......................................... 66
LIFTGATE ............................................................... 66
Opening ........................................................ 66
Closing.......................................................... 67
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...................... 67
Cargo Area Features.................................... 68
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 70
Storage ......................................................... 70
Cupholders .................................................. 71
Power Outlets............................................... 71
Power Inverter — If Equipped...................... 73
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............ 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................................... 75
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 77
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 78
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ....................................................... 78
Oil Change Reset ......................................... 79
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 80
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 86
TRIP COMPUTER...................................................87
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................87
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 88
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 91
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 95
Green Indicator Lights................................. 95
White Indicator Lights ................................. 97
Blue Indicator Lights ................................... 97
Gray Indicator Lights ................................... 97
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......98
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................... 98
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................99
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 100
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................100
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .....101
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 109
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped................................................. 109
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...........................114
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)...........................................116
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 121
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...121
Important Safety Precautions...................121
Seat Belt Systems .................................... 122
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
Supplemental Restraint
Systems (SRS)............................................130
Child Restraints..........................................146
Transporting Pets ......................................158
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 158
Transporting Passengers ..........................158
Exhaust Gas ...............................................158
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................159
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................161
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 162
Normal Starting..........................................162
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ......................................................164
Extended Park Starting..............................164
After Starting — Warming Up
The Engine..................................................164
If Engine Fails To Start .............................164
Stopping The Engine..................................165
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 165
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 166
PARK BRAKE...................................................... 166
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........................166
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .... 170
Shifting .......................................................171
Downshifting ..............................................172
Parking .......................................................173
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................173
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................174
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System........................................................174
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission .............................................174
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................180
Jeep Active Drive........................................180
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED ......................182
Mode Selection Guide...............................182
POWER STEERING .............................................183
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............183
Automatic Mode.........................................183
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................184
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................184
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................185
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................185
System Malfunction...................................185
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...................186
To Activate..................................................186
To Set A Desired Speed.............................186
To Vary The Speed Setting........................186
To Accelerate For Passing.........................187
To Resume Speed ....................................188
To Deactivate ............................................188
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 188
To Activate/Deactivate.............................. 190
Activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)..............................................190
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................191
To Cancel ...................................................191
To Turn Off .................................................191
To Resume .................................................192
To Vary The Speed Setting........................192
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ....193
Overtake Aid...............................................194
ACC Operation At Stop...............................195
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........195
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........196
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........197
General Information ..................................199
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode ..........................................................200
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 202
ParkSense Sensors ...................................202
ParkSense Warning Display......................202
ParkSense Display.....................................202
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........205
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................205
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............205
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....205
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 207
LaneSense Operation................................207
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................207
LaneSense Warning Message ..................208
Changing LaneSense Status.....................211
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 212
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 213
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 214
Certification Label......................................214
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 216
Common Towing Definitions .....................216
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................218
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................219
Towing Requirements ...............................219
Towing Tips ................................................222
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................... 223
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................223
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models...................................223
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models .........224
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 224
On-Road Driving Tips .................................224
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................227
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ....227
General Information ..................................231
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................232
Replacement Bulbs ...................................232
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped.................................................234
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................234
Replacing Interior Bulbs............................238
FUSES ..................................................................241
General Information ..................................241
Fuse Location.............................................241
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit .............................................................241
Interior Fuses.............................................245
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
Unit .............................................................246
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................248
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage...........248
Preparations For Jacking ..........................249
Jacking Instructions ..................................249
Road Tire Installation ................................252
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...................253
JUMP STARTING.................................................258
Preparations For Jump Start.....................259
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................260
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 261
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 261
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 262
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 263
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 264
Without The Key Fob .................................265
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models —
With Key Fob..............................................265
4x4 Models ................................................265
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .....265
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 266
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 267
Maintenance Plan .....................................268
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 271
2.4L Engine................................................271
Checking Oil Level .....................................272
Adding Washer Fluid ................................272
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................272
Pressure Washing......................................273
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 273
Engine Oil ..................................................273
Engine Oil Filter..........................................274
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................274
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................275
Body Lubrication........................................276
Wiper Blades .............................................276
Exhaust System ........................................279
Cooling System ..........................................281
Brake System ............................................284
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........285
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....285
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 286
TIRES .................................................................. 286
Tire Safety Information .............................286
Tires — General Information .....................295
Tire Types ...................................................299
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................300
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................301
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............302
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 303
Treadwear ..................................................303
Traction Grades .........................................303
Temperature Grades .................................304
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 304
BODYWORK........................................................ 305
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......305
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........305
Preserving The Bodywork..........................307
INTERIORS ......................................................... 308
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................308
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................308
Leather Parts .............................................309
Glass Surfaces ..........................................309
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA.......................................310
Vehicle Identification Number ..................310
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................310
Torque Specifications................................310
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................311
2.4L Engine................................................311
Reformulated Gasoline ............................311
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................312
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......312
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications..... 312
MMT In Gasoline........................................312
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................312
Fuel System Cautions................................313
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................313
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................314
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................314
Engine.........................................................314
Chassis .......................................................315
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................316
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................316
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................317
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings ..................................317
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .................329
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .......... 342
Safety Guidelines.......................................342
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY .............. 343
Introduction................................................343
Radio Mode................................................344
Media Mode...............................................352
Phone Mode...............................................359
CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED ......... 370
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™ ......370
Getting Started With SiriusXM
Guardian™ ................................................372
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................373
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account ......................................................386
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs .......................... 387
SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours: ..... 387
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................387
Connected Services Roadside
Assistance FAQs .......................................387
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....387
Connected Services Vehicle
Finder FAQs ...............................................388
Connected Services Remote Door
Lock/Unlock FAQs ....................................388
Connected Services Remote
Horn & Lights FAQs....................................388
Connected Services Account FAQs...........389
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs .................................................391
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 392
Radio Operation.........................................392
Media Mode ...............................................392
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................................ 392
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 393
Regulatory And Safety Information...........393
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ........................................................ 394
Introducing Uconnect ................................394
Get Started.................................................395
Basic Voice Commands.............................396
Radio ..........................................................396
Media..........................................................396
Phone .........................................................396
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped .................397
Climate .......................................................398
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped...........398
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................398
Using Do Not Disturb ................................398
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................399
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................399
General Information ..................................400
Additional Information...............................400
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................401
Prepare For The Appointment...................401
Prepare A List.............................................401
Be Reasonable With Requests .................401
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................401
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................402
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........402
In Mexico Contact ......................................402
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............402
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................402
Service Contract .......................................402
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 403
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 403
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 403
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................403
In Canada...................................................403
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 404
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications
carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®
parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the
information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment
ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete
listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate
precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle
safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause
of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal
use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
1
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the
vehicle is in motion, the system will display:
Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system that
consists of a key fob and a Keyless Enter-N-Go
button.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
The keyless ignition key fob also includes an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the
key fob.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Lock Button
3 — Remote Start Button
4 — PANIC Button
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Liftgate Button (If Equipped)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Emergency Key Removal
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking the glove compartment. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key from the keyless
ignition key fob, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the key
fob. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Multimedia” for
further programmable information.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar object and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match
the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP push button ignition has three
operating modes. The three modes are OFF,
ON/RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ON/RUN
Driving mode.
All the electrical devices are available.
START
Start the engine.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
NOTE:
For further information, refer to “Starting The
Engine” in “Starting And Operating.”
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in ON/RUN (engine not running) mode, a
chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the Vehicle On message will display in
the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active for three
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing for this feature is
programmable.
Never remove the mechanical key while the
vehicle is moving, as the steering wheel will
automatically lock as soon as the key is
turned. This also applies to vehicles that
are being towed.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, place the engine in the
OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make
sure the keyless ignition is in OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100m).
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. Pushing the remote start
button a third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started manually with
the key fob after two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Check engine light shall not be present
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an
intrusion
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times with the key fob. However, the ignition
must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP
ignition button twice (or the ignition switch
must be placed in the ON/RUN position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for
a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle
security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release
the START/STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through
the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.
Exiting remote start will resume previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to your authorized dealer.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to “Doors” in this chapter.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
vehicle security light (located in the lower left
portion of the instrument cluster display) will
begin to flash every three seconds until it is
disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock
button on the interior door panel, the vehicle
security light will flash rapidly for about
15 seconds once the door is closed, then
slow down to every three seconds.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to
unlock the door. Refer to “Doors” in this
chapter for further information.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF mode to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after approximately 90 seconds,
and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm
itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward until the lock
indicator is shown. To unlock the front doors,
pull the inside door handle to the first detent or
rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden.
If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator
visible) when you shut the door, the door will
remain locked. Therefore, make sure the key
fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the
door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of
the front door trim panels. Use this switch to
lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel door.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any door
or the liftgate is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors
and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security alarm.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the Passive Entry system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry
vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car and it does not find any Passive
Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the liftgate handle release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located to the right of the liftgate
handle release.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the Passive Entry lock
button located on the outside door handle, to
lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Ucon-
nect System, the key protection described in
“Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob In Vehicle” remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the door lock button until the lock indi-
cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the
outside door handle.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Memory Switches
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be
programmed to recall one of two saved memory
profiles with a push of the unlock button on the
key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in
this section for instructions on how to set a
memory profile.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds
push and release the button labeled (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or
2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted when
the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will
display in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
lever to raise the seat height or push downward
on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space.
When the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of
the load floor surface (allowing long cargo to fit
from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel).
The fold-forward seatback has a softback
surface that you cannot use as a work surface
when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle
is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold
the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to position the front seat to its mid-track
position. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on
either side of the upper outer edge of the seat.
Rear Seat Release Lever
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback
completely forward.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while
in the unlocked position. Once the seat is
locked in, the red indicator will no longer be
visible.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power
driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The
power seat switch and power seat recliner
switch are located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to
adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward
position. Use the power seat recline switch to
adjust the angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch and the front of the
seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward
or rearward. The seatback will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9
of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile. Refer to “Driver Memory
Settings — If Equipped” in this chapter for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later
disabled) through the programmable features
in the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic
temperature controls with an integrated center
stack, or manual temperature controls, you’ll
find the heated seat switches on the switch
bank below the radio screen.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO
level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up
or down. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there is no occupant in
the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the
control handle upward until fully engaged.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield button with a counter clockwise
rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or
tilted up and down for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield button with a counter clockwise
rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or
tilted up and down for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Electrochromic Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve
rear view viewing.
The Electrochromic Mirror feature can be
turned on or off using the button located on
the mirror.
Automatic Dimming Button
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
and a slight overlap of the view obtained from
the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-
cially of the lane next to your vehicle.
Power Adjustment Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver’s door panel.
To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the right
or left side using the mirror selector switch, then
push the mirror adjustment switch in the desired
direction indicated by the direction arrows.
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN position.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the
control to the neutral position to avoid acci-
dental movements.
Power Mirror Switch
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid
damage. The mirror has three detent positions:
full forward, normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located in the power mirror switch.
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the
mirrors to the normal driving position.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch (If Equipped)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
Puddle Lamps — If Equipped
Located under the exterior mirrors is a small
lamp that illuminates the ground when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob or when the
doors to the vehicle are open.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional
sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while
the sun visor is against the windshield for addi-
tional sun blockage through the front of the
vehicle.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when
the engine is started and remain on unless the
headlamps are turned on or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back toward the steering wheel will return the
lights to low beams.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Lighting Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the last detent for automatic
headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds
(programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds.
The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the
OFF position to activate this feature. If the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position prior
to turning the ignition OFF, there is no need to
turn the headlight switch to off to activate
Headlight Delay.
The headlight delay time is programmable
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will
sound to alert the driver when the driver's door
is opened.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the fog light button. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the fog lights button a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and
a turn signal is activated, the Daytime
Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the
vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. This will
occur if the interior lights were switched on
manually or are on because a door is open.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Interior Courtesy Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is
opened. The light switches in the overhead
console are for reading lamps.
Overhead Light Switches
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are
on because a door is open. This includes the
glove compartment light and the cargo area
light. To restore interior light operation, either
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or
cycle the light switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
the headlight switch and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control
upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights, ONLY when the parking
lights or headlights are turned on.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or
down will adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights ONLY when the parking
lights or headlights are turned on, AND ONLY if
the built in cluster light sensor determines that
the ambient light levels are low enough that the
backlighting should be enabled.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, lights
under the instrument panel, door map pocket
lights, and cubby bin lights.
Ambient lights are only enabled when the
headlights are active.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the windshield wiper/washer lever
on the right side of the steering column. The
front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear
Window Wiper/Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two
detent positions for intermittent settings. The
first intermittent wiper interval is 10 seconds.
The second intermittent wipe interval is based
on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third detent for
low wiper operation and the fourth detent for
high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released the pump will resume
normal operation.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver. The feature is especially
useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one
of two settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is
in Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is
cycled from OFF to ON, the auto wiper will be
suppressed until vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is
moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The
Rain Sensing system will not operate if the
NEUTRAL gear is selected at speeds of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper
switch is moved or the gear selector is moved
out of NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The rear wiper/
washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The rear wiper has
different operation modes:
Intermittent mode
In Synchronous mode (at half speed of the
front window wiper) when the front window
wiper is operating.
Continuous mode
Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wiper is
active and the REVERSE gear is selected, the
wiper will turn on for one wipe.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is
desired. If the lever is pushed while
the wiper is in the off position, the
wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then
turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released the pump will resume
normal operation.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated
under the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost— The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally in the case of a cold weather manual
start with full front defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally when the rear defrost is turned on and
when the ambient temperature is below
41°F (5°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation (If
Equipped) — When remote start is active and
the outside ambient temperature is less than
41°F (5°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
resume previous operation except, if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera-
tion shall continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Controls
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Climate Controls Description
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C Setting, to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving
the Temperature Control Knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Control Knob
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as
you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the Mode Control knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as
follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the off (O) position.
Icon Description
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Controls Description
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is
not recommended.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting. The
AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. This feature automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting
airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for further information.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the read
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Faceplate Mode Button
Touchscreen Mode
Buttons
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution outlets are: instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower increases in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Controls
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to position and
turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
cancel this feature. The time is programmable.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
down, for a short period of time, and release
and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch down briefly and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of
time, and release and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window switch again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button with turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn back off).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed open
positions, comfort stop position and full open
position. The comfort stop position has been
optimized to minimize wind buffeting when
driving with side windows closed and sunroof
open. If the sunshade is in the closed position
when initiating a sunroof open or vent command
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Express
Push the switch and release it within one-half
second, the sunroof will open to the comfort
stop position and automatically stop. Push the
switch and release it again, the sunroof will
open to the full open position and automatically
stop. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch, the sunroof will open
to the comfort stop position and automatically
stop. Push the switch and hold it again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will
stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
switch is pushed and held again.
Opening Sunroof — Vent
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will move from
the closed position to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent.” During Express Vent
operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
NOTE:
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial
open position, Express Vent operation is not
available. You must push and hold the vent
switch to cycle the sunroof from a slide open
position to the vent position. Sunroof move-
ment will stop if the switch is released prior to
the sunroof reaching the vent position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-
ating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Do not use the sunroof and its related parts
for supporting and/or grabbing purposes.
Serious personal injury may result to
fingers and other body parts as well as
damage to the sunroof.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof
Express
Pull the switch down and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
Pull and hold the switch down and the sunroof
will close from any position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the sunroof switch is pulled again.
Opening Power Shade
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half open and full open positions.
When opening the sunshade from the closed
position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be
actuated again to continue on to full open
position.
Express
Push the sunshade switch and release it within
one-half second, the sunshade will open to the
half open position and stop automatically. Push
and release the switch again from the half open
position and the sunshade will open to the full
open position and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade switch, the
sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch again and the sunshade will
open to the full open position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
If the sunroof is open/vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pulling the sunshade close switch when
sunshade is at half open position with sunroof
open/vented will automatically close sunroof
prior to the sunshade closing.
Express
Pull the sunshade switch down and release it
within one-half second. If the sunroof is in
closed position, the sunshade will full close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
open or vented, the sunshade will close to the
half open position and stop; pull and release the
sunshade switch again to automatically close
both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch
will stop the sunshade.
Manual Mode
Pull and hold the sunshade switch down. If the
sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade will
fully close from any position. If the sunroof is
open or vented, the sunshade will close to the
half open position and stop; pulling and holding
the sunshade switch again will close both the
sunroof and sunshade completely. Any release
of the switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pulled again.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located
underneath the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Location
(Underneath Instrument Panel)
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The
safety latch release lever is located behind
the front edge of the hood at the center.
Reach in at the center of the hood with a
palm facing the ground. Once contact is
made with the safety latch release lever,
push it toward the passenger side of the
vehicle to fully release the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
Closing The Hood
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released by the overhead
console switch, the outside handle, or the key
fob (if equipped).
The overhead console switch and key fob (if
equipped) will release the liftgate when the
liftgate is unlocked or locked. The outside
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the
door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors
and the exterior door lock cylinder will not lock
and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate reaches the self-closing position.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may
be locked.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or
closed by the key fob, outside handle,
overhead console switch, and the
liftgate switch on the upper left trim.
Using any of the following ways:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open.
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close.
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse.
The key fob and the overhead console switch
will open the liftgate when the liftgate is locked.
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be
unlocked. Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or
closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in
the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime
will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in
"Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate
may be locked.
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on
the door panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder
will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Lock The Vehicle
NOTE:
The liftgate will not power open or close if the
gear selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side
of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the system
will automatically stop. If this occurs, the lift-
gate must be opened or closed manually.
The power liftgate will not operate in
temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or
temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure
to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure
drops with temperature, it may be necessary
to assist the props when opening the liftgate
in cold weather.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door open message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
If your liftgate is power closing and you put
the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue
to power close. However, vehicle movement
may result in a detection of an obstruction.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed while the power liftgate is opening,
the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the
liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manu-
ally pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity
of 400 lbs (181 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three
different levels to create more space in the
cargo area. These positions are: upper, center,
and lower.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure
the liftgate path is clear before activating the
liftgate.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
The lower position is not available in vehicles
equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a
full size spare tire. The center position is not
available in vehicles equipped with a full size
spare tire.
To change the level of the load floor, pull
upward on the load floor handle, pull the floor
outward, and place the back of the floor into the
desired position. Lower the front of the floor into
place.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access of the Tire
Service Kit, or spare tire (if equipped), pull
upward on the load floor handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of
resistance. In vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate, forcing the floor upward can damage
the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the
floor handle, pull the floor outward, then
position the floor upright with the bottom fitting
on top of the floor positioning brackets. Push
the top of the floor down firmly to secure it in
this position.
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this chapter
for further information.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor
should be used to secure loads safely when the
vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim
panels.
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
2 — Raised Load Floor
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of
the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bin
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and
allow the child seat to come loose. A child
could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console armrest can also be
adjusted forward and rearward by pushing in
the desired direction until it locks into place.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which
can hold cell phones, personal digital assistants
(PDAs), and other small items.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers, located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders (if equipped) for the
rear seat passengers, located in the center
armrest.
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there may
also be a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area, if equipped.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
NOTE:
If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet
can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See an autho-
rized dealer for details.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Power Inverter — If Equipped
Power Inverter Location
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug
in the device. The outlet automatically turns off
when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed
over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or property
damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in this chapter for
further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following as equipped:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start (If Equipped)
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
The systems allow the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu and submenus.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the main menu and submenus.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance, refer
to the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to change the
speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice
versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to cycle
through the Vehicle Info submenus and follow
the prompts on each screen as needed.
1. Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle
ICON is displayed with tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure,
“Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the
vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values
in each corner of the ICON with the pres-
sure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pres-
sure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires
service, “Service Tire Pressure System” is
displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function
and cannot be reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” under “Safety” for
further information.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission tempera-
ture.
4. Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and hold
the OK button to reset average fuel economy
feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km) esti-
mated driving distance, the Range display will
change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new
Range value will display. Range cannot be
reset through the OK button.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – This display shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L)
since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while
driving.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed
and highlighted in the instrument cluster
display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status. Push
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the
following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Push and
release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Date
Time
Ignition State
Range
Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster
Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Time
Ignition State (default setting)
Range
Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster
Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster
Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To
Default Settings)
Yes
No
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off (default setting)
Center
None
Compass
Menu Title (default setting)
Date
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Audio Info
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Speedometer
Vehicle Settings — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. This menu
item allows you to change the settings for the
following:
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
Lights
Doors and Locks
Compass — If Equipped
NOTE:
Most vehicle settings will be moved into the
radio if a touchscreen radio is present, please
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Display
By selecting Display, the following settings can
be selected:
Language: select the language in which to
display the information/warnings.
Nav. Repetition: displays information relating
to the navigation mode.
Units
By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to
use for displaying various values can be set.
Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom: allows individual changes of units
for temperature, distance, consumption, and
tire pressure.
Clock And Date
By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date
can be set. Possible options are:
Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
Set Format: adjust the time format “12h”
(12 hours) or “24h” (24 hours)
Set Date: adjust day/month/year
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Security
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of
Passenger Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be
made if a child restraint must be installed in the
front seat.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the
following adjustments can be made:
ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the
type of information provided by ParkSense
Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selec-
tion of the volume of the beeps provided by
the front ParkSense
Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selec-
tion of the volume of the beeps provided by
the rear ParkSense
FCW Warning (If Equipped): a selection of
operating modes of the system Forward Colli-
sion Warning Plus
FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of
the “readiness” of intervention of the
Forward Collision Warning Plus system,
based on the distance to the obstacle
Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/
disabling the automatic operation of wipers
in the event of rain
LaneSense Force (If Equipped): selection of
the force to be applied to the steering wheel
to put the car in the roadway through the
system of electrical drive, in case of opera-
tion of the system LaneSense
LaneSense Warning (If Equipped): a selec-
tion of the “readiness” of intervention of
LaneSense
Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low,
Medium, Loud
Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the
procedure to carry out braking system main-
tenance
Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable
auto insertion of the Electric Parking Brake
Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit,
which the driver is notified through a visual
and acoustic signaling (display of a message
and a symbol on the display). When the
speed warning is set, the icon (a circle with
the set speed inside of it) should remain visu-
alized until the driver turns the Speed
Warning off. If the driver exceeded the set
speed, a single chime will sound along with a
pop up message of “Speed Warning
Exceeded.” Driver may also turn the Speed
Warning “OFF” in the Instrument Cluster
Display should you choose not to use this
feature. To turn the feature off, the driver
must use the Instrument Cluster Display
buttons to navigate to the Speed Warning,
and then press the up or down arrow until you
reach “OFF” rather than a speed.
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of
the Hill Start Assist system
Lights
By selecting Lights, the following adjustments
can be made:
Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the
sensitivity of lighting in the doors and over-
head console
Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight
shutoff after engine shutoff
Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of
headlight brightness
Greeting Lights: activate the direction indica-
tors when unlocking the doors
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deacti-
vate the daytime running lights
Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/
deactivate the cornering lights
Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deac-
tivate the automatic high beam headlights
Doors And Locks
By selecting Doors and Locks, the following
adjustments can be made:
Auto Lock Doors: activate/deactivate the
automatic locking of the doors with the
vehicle moving
Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of
the doors when exiting the vehicle
Lights with Lock: activate the direction indica-
tors when locking the doors
Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate
the horn when pressing the lock button on
the key. The options are “Off”, “First Press”,
and “Second Press”
Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): acti-
vate/deactivate the horn at the Remote
Starting of the engine with the key
Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to
unlock all the doors or only the driver’s side
door on the first push of the unlock button on
the key
Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/
deactivate automatic climate control during
vehicle starts
Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deacti-
vate memory linked to a key
Compass
By selecting Compass, the following settings
can be changed:
Calibration (If Equipped)
This compass is self-calibrating, which
eliminates the need to set the compass
manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the cluster
will display dashes (- -) until the compass is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass
by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in
an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Variance (If Equipped)
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To
compensate for the differences, the variance
should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate
compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this chapter for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to
select Trip A or Trip B). Push and release the OK
button to display the Trip information.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON/START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK
button to clear the resettable function being
displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this light will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate
for approximately 15 seconds when
the vehicle security alarm is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, have the brake system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is Active. The “ESC Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after
an accident has occurred, and the
system has shut the fuel off.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low.
For further information, refer to
“Cooling System” in “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is
13.5 gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the
Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on
when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal
(5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” in
“Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a
failure with the tow hook. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information
on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Forward Collision Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security alarm system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could
illuminate if a problem with the system is
detected. This condition will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
there is no target vehicle detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the
target vehicle is detected. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
For further information, refer to
“Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle”.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Stop / Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the
automatic high beam headlights
are on.
For further information, refer to “Exterior Lights”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
White Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are
not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of
the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these
systems are operating properly, your vehicle will
provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store
diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you should not proceed to the
I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in
the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of Anti-lock
Brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Hill Descent Control
(HDC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin for each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similarly to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that
provides torque at the steering wheel for certain
driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the
steering wheel receives is only meant to help
the driver realize optimal steering behavior in
order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The
only notification the driver receives that the
feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle
under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC OFF Button
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button to enter “Partial Off” mode. Once
the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use when ESC stability features could
inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. This mode is entered by pushing
and holding the “ESC OFF” switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is running. After five seconds, the "ESC
OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate and the “ESC
OFF” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches
a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
(64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, as described above. TCS remains off.
When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph
(48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. ESC is
deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will
not interfere with off-road driving. However, ESC
function returns to provide the stability feature
at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The "ESC
OFF Indicator Light" will always be illuminated
when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
“ESC OFF” switch. This will restore the “ESC On”
mode of operation.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector
is placed into the PARK (P) position from any
other position, and then moved out of the PARK
position. This will occur even if the message was
previously cleared.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is turned to the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash
as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4L Range.
The vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted
within the thresholds by using throttle or brake
application.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed
with throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed
exceeding 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is
on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range.
The driver’s door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED, which offer feedback to
the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain solid when HDC is enabled
or activated. This is the normal operating
condition for HDC.
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds
then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch when enable conditions have not
been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide
assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a
trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will
periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an
emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
system will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the
rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of
the vehicle. The zone length starts at the
outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone does NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear
for both your vehicle and trailer before making
a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be
necessary to deactivate the BSM system
manually to avoid misdetection. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then
activated, and it corresponds to an alert present
on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at
the same time, both the visual and audio alerts
will be issued. In addition to the audible alert
the radio (if on) will also be muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
NOTE:
The BSM system may experience drop outs
(blinking on and off) in the side mirror LED icons
while a motorcycle, or any small target, remains
at the vehicle’s B-pillar for an extended period
of time (longer than a couple of seconds).
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio volume
is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is
ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
be illuminated. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing
conditions are met. First clear the fascia area
around the sensors of the blockage. After
removing the blockage, reset the system by
cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then
back ON.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h),
the system may provide the maximum braking
possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this
allows the system to provide warning and auton-
omous braking in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Warning Only”
prevents the system from providing
autonomous braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the
system, so no warning or autonomous braking
will be available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is
restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Operation Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the FCW is in the “Full On” setting.
This allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than in the "Medium" setting.
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the vehicle in the front is much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will
be displayed.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available. Once
the condition that limited the system
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still driveable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will
continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure
as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which will display in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message, an “Inflate to XX” message, and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted
or in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those highlighted or in a different color in the
instrument cluster display graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic
display in the instrument cluster will stop being
highlighted or return to their original color, and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact or
non-matching full size spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a
different color or highlighted pressure value
and the “Inflate to XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display
a new pressure value instead of dashes (--),
as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact
information.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front
air bag can cause death or serious injury to a
child 12 years or younger, including a child in
a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
(Continued)
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The
mini-latch plate and buckle, if equipped, should
remain connected at all times. If the mini-latch
plate and buckle become disconnected, they
must be properly reconnected prior to the rear
center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt
if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
(Continued)
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child
restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a
child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster
seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR
Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power
deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service
procedures to the passenger seat
assembly, its related components, seat
cover or cushion may inadvertently change
the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or
serious injury to the front passenger if the
vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in
order to be successful.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be
completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
givers
or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,
” then the child still needs to use a booster seat
in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in
the center position. The inner anchorages are 16 inches
(400 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid
lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
(Continued)
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in this
section for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that
all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Place the ignition switch in the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will continue to run, and will
automatically disengage itself when the engine
is running. If the engine fails to start, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — With Driver’s Foot OFF
The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the
ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the
RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch to
the OFF position.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply
the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the clutch pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In
PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the
ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the
OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the
RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch to
the OFF position.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
5 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, and
has not experienced an extended park
condition as identified in “Extended Park
Starting” procedure it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank continuously for more than 10 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Stopping The Engine
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless
Enter-N-Go):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the ignition or push the ENGINE
START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
RUN position to the STOP position), the power
supply to the accessories are maintained for a
period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to STOP.
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position,
the window switches remain active for three
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp.
Follow the steps below to properly use the
engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap, and properly stow
away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized Mopar dealer.
The engine block heater will require
110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the
heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in
“Servicing And Maintenance”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park
Brake System (EPB) that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that
make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect settings.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
(Continued)
The park brake switch is located in the center
console.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight
whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
while the park brake engages. Once the park
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal while you apply the park brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The park brake can be applied even
when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE
warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can
only be released when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK,
or with a manual transmission, when the ignition
switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the park brake is
engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when
the ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in
DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put
your foot on the brake pedal, then push the park
brake switch down momentarily. You may hear
a slight whirring sound from the back of the car
while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the park brake before placing the
gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not rely on the parking brake to operate
effectively if the rear brakes have been
immersed in water or mud.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the park brake while the
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure
on the electric park brake switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning
lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the
Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault
lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied
by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this
event, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition
switch is in the OFF position. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect Settings.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system
that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition
switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
The clutch pedal is not pressed.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is
open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON/RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode
during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
electric park brake system, this can only be
done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in park or neutral.
The EPB switch not activated.
The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON/RUN.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
cannot be deactivated.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engagement
of the gears is displayed on the handle of the
selector).
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the park
brake fully applied. The park brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle
on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and move the gear selector all the way
left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
for fuel economy and performance, it should be
upshifted as listed in the recommended shift
speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed
for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling
a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds
may not apply.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but
it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the trans-
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not
an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines
Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at
the right time provides better acceleration when
you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle
could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to
shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
depressed may result damage to the clutch
system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing
the clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal depressed could result in clutch
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
(Continued)
(Continued)
Parking
When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed
as follows:
Engage a gear (FIRST gear if facing uphill or
REVERSE if facing downhill) and leave the
wheels turned.
Stop the engine and engage the park brake.
Always remove the key fob.
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if
the vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
NOTE:
NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in neutral
(or, if equipped with automatic transmission,
before placing the gear lever in PARK).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these
conditions may cause the engine to overspeed
if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch
pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and
the transmission can result from skipping a
gear while downshifting or downshifting at too
high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Always remove the key fob when
exiting the vehicle and take it with you.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the park brake. Always apply the
park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear when shifting between PARK,
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is
moving while shifting.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to
the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
(P) unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is
running or not), and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed
to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed
or nine-speed automatic transmission,
depending on model. This section describes
operation of both the six-speed and nine-speed
transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the park brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
transmission out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N),
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE (D) range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE (R)
while driving forward), the position indicator will
blink continuously until the selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
9th gear only in very specific driving situations
and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the
gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position will manually select the
transmission gear. Refer to "AutoStick" in this
section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) posi-
tion (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] posi-
tion) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the
vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the park brake. Always apply the
park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear when shifting between PARK,
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is
moving while shifting.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
park brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the park brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear (refer to "AutoStick" in this
section for further information). Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
"Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may
illuminate, and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and/or transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. This feature improves
warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch (and, for the
nine-speed, shifts into 8th or 9th gear), are
inhibited until the engine and/or transmission
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque
Converter Clutch” in this section). Normal
operation will resume once the temperature(s)
have risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can
be moved forward and rearward. This allows the
driver to manually select the transmission gear
being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except
as described below.
Six-speed transmissions will automatically
upshift when necessary to prevent engine
over-speed.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in six-speed
models, or in 4WD LOW range, SNOW mode,
or SAND mode, where available). Tapping (+)
(at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear.
Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of
the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Jeep Active Drive
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is
shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater
the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and
performance characteristics.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
4WD LOCK
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
power transfer unit.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
4WD LOCK Switch
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving
mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
models only)
4WD LOW Switch (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD LOW, please follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or with the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
push the button once 4WD LOW. The
instrument cluster will display the message
"4WD LOW" once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
The instrument cluster display will illuminate
the "4WD LOW" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission shifted
into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic and
can be used on and off road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverability
and acceleration improvement compared to
a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode
also reduces fuel consumption, since it
allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather. For
use on and off road on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered with snow.
When in SNOW mode (depending on certain
operating conditions), the transmission may
use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear)
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand. The
transmission is set to provide maximum trac-
tion.
MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets
the vehicle to maximize traction and allow
the highest steering capacity for off-road
surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep
downhill control. See “Electronic Brake
Control System” in this section for further
information.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR
"POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster display, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT -
PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and
an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
display, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following
situations the engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE (D).
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The drivers door is open and brake pedal
released.
The drivers door is open and the drivers seat
belt is unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the electric park brake may require a
manual release (depress brake pedal and press
Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system) the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control functions
are operated at the same time. If this occurs,
the Speed Control System can be reactivated
by pushing the Speed Control on/off button
and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
speed control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
(Continued)
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the cruise
control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will effect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning system.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
In vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, will bring the vehicle to a complete
stop while following a target vehicle and
hold the vehicle for approximately three
minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving
within three minutes, the parking brake
will be activated and the ACC system
will be canceled.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver door is open at low speeds.
When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds.
When driver switches Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) to Full Off mode.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the Drive
position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
Manual transmission is not in a forward gear,
if equipped.
Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch
pressed down for a fixed amount of time, if
equipped.
Manual transmission vehicle speed drops
below 15 mph (24 km/h), if equipped.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the
RES button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
If equipped with a manual transmission, the
ACC system applies the brake down to
15 mph (24 km/h) when following a target
vehicle.
If equipped with a automatic transmission,
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and
downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the
braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer). Once the
longest setting is reached, if the button is
pushed again it will be set to the shortest
setting available.
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Light icon, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. Refer to the informa-
tion on ACC Activation.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a target
vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following shows in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) and the following will
read in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable
Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable
Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to
maintain a set cruising speed without requiring
the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed
is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC on and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH/km/h” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
Manual transmission is not in a forward gear,
if equipped.
Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch
pressed down, if equipped.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. The system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While
in REVERSE and above the system's operating
speed, a warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too
fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist system
status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
audible chime increases as the objects get
close to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the audible chime increases as
the objects get close to the vehicle.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single, 1/2
second, audible
chime is heard.
Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle. Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” for more information. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see your
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, etc. are attached to the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
The operation of the rear sensors is automat-
ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
socket. The rear sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display, to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver when
the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is
“Off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button to turn the system on (LED
turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is shown
in the instrument cluster display.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once to turn the system off
(LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and the
left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed With Solid White Thick Line, Solid White
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line, Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow, the left thin line remains solid yellow
and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow and the left thin line remains solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale stays solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning (Low/
Medium/High) and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (anti-lock brakes, traction control
system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
Use of the turn signals and Hazard Warning
flashers also suppresses the warnings.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
With Camera Delay turned on, the camera
image can be disabled via the Image Defeat (X)
button on the touchscreen when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed
at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and
closes automatically upon insertion/extraction
of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel System is
designed so that it prevents the filling of an
incorrect type of fuel.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
outer edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
5. Wait 10 seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A
funnel is provided to open the flapper door to
allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
Fuel Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper door open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that
appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Model
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.4L / Manual FWD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / Manual 4WD 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L / 6 Speed Auto FWD or 4WD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 9 Speed Auto 4WD 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg),
whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on
a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
(Continued)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options, or autho-
rized dealer-installed options, must be consid-
ered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the tire loading information placard
located on the driver’s door pillar for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
increased engine braking on steep downhill
grades, select the LOW range.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not
increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle,
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place
the transmission in PARK (P). Turn the
engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on flatbed
or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
(refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in this section for further details).
This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
will be damaged.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water
deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce
speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine,
transmission, Power Transfer Unit, and Rear
Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD
LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage,
but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into
the loose surface and rendering the operator of
the vehicle stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back slowly
down the hill allowing the compression braking
of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
5
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill
- drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the front wheels
slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and may provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill
Descent Control if equipped (refer to "Safety
Features" in the “Safety” section for further
information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control
the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbal-
ance. Freeing the wheels of impacted mate-
rial will likely rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking
system may cause excessive wear or
unpredictable braking performance. Full
braking power may not be available to prevent
a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean
the braking components as soon as possible.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
227
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact your authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact your authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) H11LL
High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) 9005LL
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) PSX24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps 7444NA
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
Front Position – Premium LED LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) D3S (HID) (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front – Halogen) W5W
Side Indicators (Front – HID) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights
Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL-M
Turn Indicators
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage
discharge light source. High voltage can remain
in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off.
Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If
an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
The bulbs can be accessed from the wheel liner
with the following procedure:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp
4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
clockwise then pull outwards.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp
bulb connector and remove the bulb and
socket.
6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure
it’s properly locked.
7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
8. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
serious electrical shock or electrocution if not
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
for service.
1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap
2 — High Beam Bulb Cap
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime
Running Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top
and bottom locking tabs and squeeze to
and remove the bulb.
5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb
towards housing. Be sure to hear both the
top and bottom locking tabs “CLICK” to
ensure the bulb is properly seated.
6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counter-
clockwise direction and remove the bulb
and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially to
remove it from the socket.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them
clockwise making sure that it is properly
locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
Fog Lamp Housing
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. For their
replacement see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
only with the engine off. Also make sure that
the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of
burns.
1 — Bulb
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Position lights
Stop lights
Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.
Body Side Tail Lamp
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding
it away from the back of the vehicle.
Body Side Tail Lamp
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning
and removing the bulb housing.
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp
assembly on the car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
1 — Fasteners Caps
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to
align the ball studs.
Body Side Tail Lamp
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access
panel for body side lamps, remove lift gate
access cover for lift gate lamps.
Liftgate
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is
properly locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure
they are locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the tailgate.
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement, see
an authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. For their
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
1 — Lift Gate Access Covers
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light assembly.
Front Courtesy Light
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing
as shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of
bulb housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they
are properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure
that it is properly locked.
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the
mirror frame with the mirror light cover
attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is properly locked
between the contacts.
Visor
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown;
remove the dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the
side contacts.
Bulb
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push
bulb holder to the side.
Bulb Holder
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the
housing.
Bulb Holder
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb
NOTE:
It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced
by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Modifications or repair of the electrical
system performed incorrectly and without
taking into account the technical character-
istics can cause malfunctions with the risk
of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure,
in the event of breakage be careful of the
projection of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by
touching only the metallic part. If the trans-
parent bulb is in contact with the fingers,
reduces the intensity of the emitted light
and you can also affect the life of the lamp.
In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and
allow to dry.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located
in the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located
on the left side of the engine compartment.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Fuse Panel & Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
slide completely from top to bottom.
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied, in the rear cargo area.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Cover Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
F03 –
30 Amp Pink with
HID Lamps
20 Amp Blue without
HID Lamps
– Supply Body Computer, HID Lamps
F04 – 40 Amp Tan – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 – 40 Amp Tan – PTC Heater
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
F06 40 Amp Orange – – Starter Relay
F07 40 Amp Orange – – Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Supply For TCM, AGSM, Steering Control
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM, TCM, Radiator Fan Control
F10 – – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F11 – –
20 Amp Yellow – 1.4L
Gas & Diesel Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4 L
Engines/UREA
ECM/PCM/UREA Fuel Injectors
F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Diesel Crankcase Heater
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Secondary Loads
F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – –
20 Amp Yellow – Gas
Engine
15 Amp Blue – Diesel
Engine
Gas - Ign Coil/Fuel Injector Diesel- Diesel Components
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Window Heater Grid
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on the bottom of the box.
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F30 – –
20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Selectable,
Move From F18)
12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery Powered
F81 60 Amp Blue – – Glow Plug Module, DDCT SDU Battery Feed
F82 – 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Filter Heater
F83 – 40 Amp Green – HVAC Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)
Fxx – –
10 Amp Red Dual Battery Control Relay With NON DDCT Trans
7.5 Amp Brown Dual Battery Control Relay With DDCT Trans
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description
F1 5 Amp Beige Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD)
F2 10 Amp Red ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense
F3 2 Amp Grey Mod Steering Control
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the driver compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
F36 20 Amp Yellow
Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering
Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic Steering Lock, Temp
Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Control,
Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane
Departure
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Access Door
To remove fuse cover, press on the tabs and lift
upward.
Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Cover
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse
holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the
vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with
trailer towing) is located closest to the front of
the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Green Power Inverter
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sun Roof – If Equipped
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / UNI-VAL fuse holder for the
HIFI Audio System.
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
F7 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger
Side)
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description
F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the
rear storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire, and remove the spare wheel from the
vehicle. The jack will be found beneath.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle,
rotate the jack counterclockwise, and lift it
from the foam tray.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
4 — Emergency Funnel
5 — Screwdriver
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
(Continued)
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
Jack And Tools
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P)
(automatic transmission) or REVERSE (R)
(manual transmission).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Screwdriver
5 — Alignment Pin
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the wheel
hub to assist in mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for the proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
12. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it
far enough so that it is secured. Once
placed in position, rotate it clockwise to lock
it in. Replace the alignment pin in the center
hole to lock the jack in place.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for the proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench
to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare
tire area. Secure the assembly using the
means provided. Release the parking brake
before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn the Tire Service Kit off.
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approx-
imately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle’s
12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob
is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through
the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with
eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that
the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 -
70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air
into the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door opening.
Check the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
1.Push the Power Button to turn
off the Tire Service Kit.
2.Remove the speed limit label
from the Tire Service Kit and
place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit
Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever
You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section
before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem, and then screw the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle's
12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto
the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7.Check the pressure in the tire by
reading the Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn
on Tire Service Kit and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
“Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire
Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps in reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
(Continued)
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the post.
Battery Post Cover
Positive Battery Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P)
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF/LOCK.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown)
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an
emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
Can Refueling” procedure. Refer to “Refueling
The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the park brake.
3. Grasp the boot material rearward of the
gear selector and pull up to carefully
separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access
hole (at the right rear corner of the gear
selector assembly), and push and hold the
override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (for automatic transmission) or
SECOND gear and REVERSE (for manual
transmission) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission, shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D)
or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the
vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the “ESC
OFF” switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the
Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door
is opened (if the battery is connected, ignition is
ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle
with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the
brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to
“Gear Selector Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
can be moved.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode.
The only approved method of towing without the
key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key
Fob
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed. The
Electric Park Brake does not need to be
released if all four wheels are OFF the ground.
4x4 Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is
required to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Use only tow bars and other equipment
designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer's instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a
tow bar or other towing devices to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets.
6
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location
Rear Tow Hook Location
Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and
subsequently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the
door. During towing, remember that not having
the aid of the power brakes and the electrome-
chanical power steering will require greater
force when applying the brakes and steering of
the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
267
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
one year or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the
first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs
before the oil indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill
as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the
following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten
terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and
hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the air cleaner filter,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt,
tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Secondary Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
4 — Battery 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types;
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual washer
fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this
section for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 or equivalent is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil fill cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming
potential. The manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by an authorized
dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield and rear window periodically
with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield or rear window. Make
sure that they are not frozen to the glass before
turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.
Keep the wiper blade out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
(Continued)
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Cooling System Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further infor-
mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch
(4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid
changes are not necessary unless lubricant has
become contaminated with water.
NOTE:
If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission
sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on front tires only.
For a 215/65R16 tire, use of a snow traction
device with a maximum projection of 7 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
NOTE:
Any aftermarket tire add on like tire chains may
effect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) feature performance.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the
following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown
in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
in tire size can cause damage to the power
transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more
than a month, observe the following
precautions:
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the
battery post and be sure that the battery is
fully charged. During storage check battery
charge quarterly.
If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge
every 30 days.
Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the glass.
Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted
surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the
tire placard and check it periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for
two weeks or more, idle the engine for
approximately five minutes, with the air
conditioning system on and high fan speed.
This will ensure proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle
is put back into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start
Procedure is required to start the vehicle.
Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative
terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute
with ignition switch in the OFF position and
close the driver’s door. When reconnecting the
positive and negative terminals to the battery
be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is closed.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
7
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the windshield and is
visible from the outside of the vehicle.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 311
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane
rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid
propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 313
(Continued)
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the
catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice
a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for
service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
8
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Gasoline Engine 13.5 Gallons 51 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Gasoline Engine Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Miles
(240,000 Kilometers) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 315
Chassis
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) – If Equipped
Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to
use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The Touch-
screen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or
press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch display
radio, along with the selectable options
pertaining to each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights On + -
Display Brightness Headlights Off + -
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout — If Equipped On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
MULTIMEDIA 319
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa or bar), and
“Temperature” (C or F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes.
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Show Time in Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
On
Off
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
MULTIMEDIA 321
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it
will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system will warn you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will
give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible
lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the Off position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
MULTIMEDIA 323
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lights — If Equipped
+ -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium sensitivity Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights
turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Greeting Lights On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated
in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn with Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn with Remote Start On Off
Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
MULTIMEDIA 325
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay + -
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
Radio Off With Door On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance & Fade + -
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker icon toward any location in the box.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 MULTIMEDIA
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Radio Off With Door” feature will keep the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has
expired.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
MULTIMEDIA 327
Phone
After pressing the Phone button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. Refer to “Phone Mode” in the “Uconnect 4 With
7-inch Display” section for further details.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset the audio settings to their default.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data — If Equipped Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
MULTIMEDIA 329
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired
language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme Options On Off
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then
select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
MULTIMEDIA 331
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never W/Help Always
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system will warn you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will
give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime will sound
alerting you of a possible collision and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it will apply the brakes
to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors and Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible
lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) not operating to specification.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle-integrated, menu-driven system, to command the electric park
brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium
sensitivity
Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights
turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated
in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Interior Ambient Lights — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
position, and the driver's door is opened.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks,
all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will
unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed for only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped + -
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for 20 minutes, or until the first door is opened after the engine is shut off.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
Smartphone Projection Manager — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software Licenses Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio.
Map Update — If Equipped Download System Information To USB Generate Request Code
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the “Generate Request Code”
will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen
to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
5. Controls
Press the Controls button on the touchscreen
to adjust the heated and vented seats or
heated steering wheel (if equipped).
6. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Settings menu.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is
available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and
can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/greyed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button, and the Direct
Tune screen will close. The system will
automatically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the six preset
buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top
of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more
information
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349
to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK. © 2020
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-877-438-9677
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play
button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The
Radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
in five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or
press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the
touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear
and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or
press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or press and drag over
the level bar for each of the equalizer bands.
The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each
of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Surround Sound. Press Off to
deactivate this feature.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio
coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower
volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when
activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and their sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Phone section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select “Bluetooth®”.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio touchscreen to
control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto™, follow the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app will begin to
download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ Icon. Android Auto™ should launch,
but if it does not, refer to “Android Auto™
And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this
section for the procedure to enable the
feature AutoShow. You can also launch it by
touching the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data, and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™ and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/
(US Residents)
https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto
(Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed into the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® icon. Apple CarPlay® should
launch, but if not, refer to “Android Auto™
And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this
section for the procedure to enable the
feature AutoShow. You can also touch the
Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to
launch it.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri
can also read incoming text messages, but
drivers will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and
push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category,
by launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed into the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. Its default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free text message replying. (Forward
one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show outgoing calls,” “Show missed
calls,” “Show recent calls”)
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP)]
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listening to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect
Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing
calls, view phonebook, etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as
“I would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog — when
the system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-
tings button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Ucon-
nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
“Connect My Phone”
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 MULTIMEDIA
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or audio
device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
MULTIMEDIA 365
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 MULTIMEDIA
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the option’s pop-up. In
the pop-up, select “Add To Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) is available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can
be accessed through the Uconnect Phone.
Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444”.
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers, it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
MULTIMEDIA 367
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Call”.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End), press the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent”, or “Missed”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID
box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”.
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
MULTIMEDIA 369
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select SMS Reader using
the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls.
The SMS Reader submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Ucon-
nect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 MULTIMEDIA
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose
connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system.
CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM® services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle.
Refer to “Data Collection and Privacy” in this
section for further information.
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
MULTIMEDIA 371
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect device, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas. Other factors outside the
control of SiriusXM Guardian™ that may limit or
prevent service delivery are hills, structures,
buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the elec-
trical system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances,
actions of third parties or the government,
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of
your vehicle, such as in an underground parking
structure or under a bridge.
For a complete list of available SiriusXM
Guardian™ services, please visit:
US residents: https://
www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html.
Canadian residents: https://
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian-v1/.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock your doors
using the Uconnect App, by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or by logging on to
your owner site at
www.mopar.com/en-us/
care/owners-manual.html
(US Residents) or
www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents). You can
also remotely start your vehicle (if equipped)
from virtually anywhere and activate your horn
and lights via the app or owner site.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your Ucon-
nect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect System and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial
period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. The Uconnect
system includes a trial* of SiriusXM Guardian™
services from your date of purchase.
* Included Trials apply to new vehicles only.
For a more complete description, please refer to
DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 MULTIMEDIA
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by
visiting the SiriusXM Guardian™ Store or calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent at:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
Getting Started With SiriusXM Guardian™
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For further information, please visit:
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using remote
commands.
To use the Uconnect app:
Once you have activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services, download the Uconnect
app to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the app.
Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote
Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and
lights remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings
and access the Assist Call Centers.
NOTE:
For further information:
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website www.mopar.com/
en-us/care/owners-manual.html (US
Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information
you need, all in one place. You can track your
service history, find recommended accessories
for your vehicle, watch videos about your
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
MULTIMEDIA 373
vehicle's features, and easily access your user
guides and manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the “Edit Profile”
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), or if your security alarm is
set off, you can elect to receive a text message,
push notifications, and/or E-mail to notify you of
the event. To set up the notifications, please
follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/
owners-manual.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents).
2. Click the Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, you can edit Notification
Preferences.
4. You can enter one mobile phone and/or
E-mail address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
Using SiriusXM Guardian™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
on-board assistance features located on the
rear view mirror designed to enhance your
driving experience if you should ever need
assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call is a feature that, at the push of a button,
can contact emergency services. It’s a
convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between
the vehicle and the live agent is made, your
vehicle will automatically transmit location
information to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care. In the event of a minor collision, medical or
any other emergency, press the SOS button to be
connected to a call center agent who can send
emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10 second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within
10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through mobile versus
the hands-free system which is not available
due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
is made, the SOS Call system will connect
your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent who will stay on the
line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
MULTIMEDIA 375
(Continued)
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The SOS light will continuously be illuminated
red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key has been removed from the
ignition and the delayed accessories mode
is active.
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ System. Vehicle must
be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
Roadside Assistance Call
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
on-board assistance features located on the
rear view mirror designed to enhance your
driving experience if you should ever need
assistance or support.
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button.
Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ services have
been activated, the ASSIST button can connect
you directly to one of four important care
centers for support.
Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
someone who can help anytime. Additional
fees may apply. (See the Disclaimers section
below for more details.)
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care —
Contact the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care call center to activate your services,
renew after your trial has expired, and for
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ system or help answering any
general questions surrounding your
connected services.
Uconnect Care Call — In-vehicle support for
all non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care Call — Total support for your
vehicle.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER
FOR ANY REASON (IN- CLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCON-
NECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SERVICES WILL NOT OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part
of the air bag system is detected. If the Air
Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
Ignoring the SOS light could mean you will
not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
SOS light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
MULTIMEDIA 377
How It Works
You or someone in the vehicle simply presses
the ASSIST button and you will be presented
with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen.
Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the U.S.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Use the mobile app to easily search and send
your locations directly to your vehicle navigation
system. It’s easy to enter and great for quick
access on the go.
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, browse through one
of the categories provided, or type the name
or keyword in the search box at the top of
the App. You can also select categories
such as Favorites or Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the “Send To Vehicle” option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Forget where you parked your car? We'll help
you locate it! Simply use the Uconnect App on
your smartphone and you'll be on track.
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle when you have lost it. You can also
sound the horn and flash the lights to make
finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then touch the Vehicle icon to find
your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the information
by pressing the layers button. Three options
will appear:
Map
Satellite
Hybrid
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect System.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Create A Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
Description
Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service
that connects your device to the AT&T
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go where ever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
MULTIMEDIA 379
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable enabled media can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
How It Works
The Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle
passengers with an internet access hotspot in
the vehicle, using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other portable
enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to
the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total
data. The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
Give it a Try!
Purchase a subscription to the Wi-Fi Hotspot
feature 3 different ways:
1. From your in-vehicle touchscreen select
the Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the “How
To Purchase” button and follow the
on-screen instructions.
2. Log onto your owner site and click the link to
the AT&T portal to get setup.
3. For existing Connect Car customers: Press
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased you can
change its name and the password by selecting
the Wi-Fi App and pressing the “Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot” button. You can also view the
connected devices from the app screen by
pressing the “View Connected Devices” button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
in order to purchase and use the Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. You should contact local law
enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle
report. Once the report has been filed with law
enforcement, you may notify SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care that you have filed
the report. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number issued by local law enforcement. The
vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 MULTIMEDIA
and must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ with an active subscription that
includes this feature. In addition, the vehicle
must be within the United States.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care can be
reached by:
US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents calling:
1-877-324-9091
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the Ucon-
nect App, you can push the “Settings”
button on your device, select “ASSIST Call
Centers,” and then select “SiriusXM Guard-
ian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect System.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Lock Or Unlock Your Vehicle From Virtually
Anywhere Using Your Computer, Mobile Device,
Or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care App.
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
distance. You can send a request to your vehicle
in one of three ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device
From the your Owner’s Site
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
MULTIMEDIA 381
How It Works
Uconnect App:
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To lock the doors, push the button with the
Closed Lock icon; to unlock the doors push
the button with the Open Lock icon.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner’s Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
system.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Push the Door Lock icon next to your vehicle
information.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command has been sent to
your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care:
1. If you need to unlock the doors of your
vehicle, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care by:
US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents calling:
1-877-324-9091
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to lock or
unlock your vehicle. The agent will send a
command to your vehicle to get the task done.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/ Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Care agents are
trained to help you with unlocking of your door
(for example, in an accidental lock-out). All other
Remote Services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Use Your Computer or Wireless Device App to
Start the Engine And Remotely Warm Up or Cool
Down the Vehicle
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your vehicle,
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Once started, the preset climate controls in your
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior
before you have to get in. You can send a request
to your vehicle in one of two ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
From the Your Owner Site website.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up notifications for your account
push notifications every time a command is
sent to Remote Start or cancel a Remote Start.
How It Works
SiriusXM Guardian™ For Uconnect App:
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To start the engine, press the “circular
arrow.” To turn off an engine that has been
remote started, press the circular arrow
with an X in the middle button.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when your
registered your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
MULTIMEDIA 383
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you
retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours,
you will see a row of icons. On your
dashboard you will see remote command
icons. To start the engine, press the
“circular arrow,” to turn-off an engine
that has been remote started press the
Cancel button.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same
four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ system).
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not trained for Remote Vehicle Start
services.
Remote Horn & Lights
Can't Find Your Vehicle In The Parking Lot?
Sound The Horn And Flash The Lights On Your
Vehicle To Locate It
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn
and lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
You can send a request to your vehicle in one
of two ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
From your Owner’s Site website.
If you want, you can set up, push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
Uconnect App:
How It Works
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To turn on the horn and lights, press the
Trumpet icon.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 MULTIMEDIA
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site website using
the username and password you used
when registering your SiriusXM Guardian™
system.
If you forgot your username or password,
links are provided on the website to help
you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours,
you will see a row of icons. To turn on the
horn and lights, press the Trumpet icon. To
turn off the horn and lights, press the
Trumpet icon again.
NOTE:
A quicker way to turn off your Remote Horn &
Lights would be to push the Panic button on
your Key Fob if you are near the vehicle.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for your regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect System in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless and until you
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
us to deactivate your Uconnect system at:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian/
privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
MULTIMEDIA 385
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem under the hood with one of
your vehicle’s key systems. For further
information, go to your Owner’s Site website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register, and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you when services are needed, or to alert you of
other important information, such as recall
notices. When you receive a notification through
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages, or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <vehicle name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask Jeep Wrangler to lock my car.”
“Alexa®, ask Dodge Challenger to start my
car.”
“Alexa®, ask Chrysler Pacifica to drive to
1000 Chrysler Dr, Auburn Hills, MI.”
“Alexa®, what’s the traffic like in Detroit?”
An activate subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™
is required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first,
register for SiriusXM Guardian™ using the
following steps:
1. Press the apps icon on the bottom bar of
your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for Uconnect, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link Uconnect to the Skill by tapping LINK
ACCOUNT.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 MULTIMEDIA
6. Log In using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and
password you used when registering for
Uconnect Access.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the Uconnect
Skill.
You can now begin using the Uconnect Skill on
Alexa®!
Drive Alerts— If Equipped
Family Alerts helps promote safer driving and
gives you peace of mind when your loved ones
are out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Boundary Alert lets you know the moment
your vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Curfew Alerts lets you know when your car is
being driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Valet Alerts lets you know if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter–mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
SmartWatch integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security pin.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch integration.
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account
How To Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
For further assistance call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
MULTIMEDIA 387
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™ if you have an active subscription,
push the ASSIST button on the rear view mirror
and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a
SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held in a queue
until an agent is available or go to your Owner’s
Site website. If you do not have an active
subscription, push the ASSIST button and click
the Activate button to activate services.
You can also phone SiriusXM Guardian™
directly by:
US calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091
SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours:
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to
10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
Connected Services SOS FAQs
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have 10
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
push the SOS Call button again, or press
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-message has a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can
choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 MULTIMEDIA
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
“Panic” button.
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allows us
to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with
below average coverage, it may take longer
to log in and send commands.
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
Lights will continue for 20 seconds.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
MULTIMEDIA 389
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
Connected Services Account FAQs
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account?
Push the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror. Press the
Activate button on the touchscreen. Select
“Call Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web. If you
choose to enter your email address, you
will then confirm your email address. You
will receive an email with an activation link
that will be good for 72 hours. Once you
click the activation link, you will be
prompted to fill out your information and
accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you
will be directed to the SiriusXM Guardian™
home page to complete your profile and
demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by
selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
You can also call SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services. For more
information, please contact SiriusXM
Guardian™:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 MULTIMEDIA
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter noti-
fication.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
entire subscription? Pro rata refunds are
provided from the date of cancellation for
annual plans or longer. Please see the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circum-
stances. Or, for more information, call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel. For other
subscriptions, please call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
MULTIMEDIA 391
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with my device is temporarily
unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST
buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls
to Roadside Assistance Call may be
functioning if you have an operable
network.
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek Up” for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek Down” for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center
console. This feature allows an external device
to be plugged into the USB or AUX ports.
Center Console USB Port
If equipped, there may also be another USB port
located on the back of the center console.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
MULTIMEDIA 393
The USB port allows interaction with a
connected smartphone via Android Auto™ or
Apple CarPlay® if the vehicle is equipped with a
Uconnect 4/4C NAV.
Rear USB Port
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further
from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 MULTIMEDIA
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV system.
Uconnect 4
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
MULTIMEDIA 395
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media,
Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-
tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say “Help”. The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands and follow the prompts
to switch your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is
displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the VR button or Phone button .
After the beep, say one of the following
commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
MULTIMEDIA 397
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button or Phone button and say “Call”,
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears
in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled) and say “Listen”. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system).
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply
”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or higher supports
reading incoming text messages only.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 MULTIMEDIA
Climate
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70
degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when the
system shows you exactly how to get to where
you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan”.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search, push
the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find
nearest coffee shop”.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
MULTIMEDIA 399
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay®, to
activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s®
features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
401
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the
FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 403
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting,
problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and
repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete
working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency, and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities, and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
405
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
..............................................188
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............282
Additives, Fuel ...............................................312
Air Bag ...........................................................132
Air Bag Operation ......................................133
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 131 , 134
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................138
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 142, 266
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................266
Front Air Bag .............................................134
If Deployment Occurs ................................141
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................138
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............145
Maintenance .............................................145
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............131
Side Air Bags .............................................138
Transporting Pets ......................................158
Air Bag Light ........................................ 131 , 159
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
.............................................................274
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................275
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................275
Air Conditioner System ..................................275
Air Conditioning ............................................... 58
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................60 , 275
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................59
Air Filter ........................................................ 274
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 296
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................22
Disarm The System .....................................23
Security Alarm ......................................22 , 91
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................22
Alexa ............................................................. 385
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Amazon Alexa ............................................... 385
Android Auto ................................................. 399
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 281 , 314
Disposal ................................................... 283
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 100
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................91
Apple CarPlay ................................................ 399
Arming System
Security Alarm
.............................................22
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 107
Audio Settings ............................................... 349
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 316
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................61
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................61
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................39
Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
Automatic Headlights .......................................43
Automatic High Beams .....................................42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............58
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 173
Automatic Transmission ................................ 174
Adding Fluid ..................................... 286 , 315
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 286
Fluid Change ............................................. 286
Fluid Level Check .............................285 , 286
Fluid Type ........................................285 , 315
Special Additives ...................................... 286
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ......28
Aux Mode ...................................................... 353
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........71
Axle Fluid....................................................... 315
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 315
B
Battery ................................................... 89 , 272
Charging System Light .................................89
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................13
Belts, Seat .................................................... 159
11
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406
Blind Spot Monitoring
....................................109
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
......369
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................364
Bluetooth Mode .............................................353
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................276
B-Pillar Location .............................................292
Brake Assist System ......................................101
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................101
Brake Fluid ....................................................315
Brake System ................................................284
Fluid Check ..................................... 284 , 315
Master Cylinder .........................................284
Parking ......................................................166
Warning Light .............................................. 88
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................174
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................ 45
Bulb Replacement .........................................232
Bulbs, Light ....................................................161
C
Camera, Rear
................................................212
Capacities, Fuel .............................................314
Caps, Filler
Fuel
...........................................................213
Oil (Engine) ...................................... 271 , 274
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................283
Car Washes ...................................................307
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................... 158 , 313
Cargo Area Cover .............................................68
Cargo Load Floor ..............................................68
Cargo Tie-Downs .......................................68 , 69
Cellular Phone .............................................. 393
Certification Label ......................................... 214
Chains, Tire ................................................... 301
Change Oil Indicator ........................................79
Changing A Flat Tire ............................. 248 , 286
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 288
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............................99
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 158
Checks, Safety .............................................. 158
Child Restraint .............................................. 146
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 149
Child Seat Installation .............................. 156
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 154
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 148
Lower Anchors And Tethers
For Children ......................................... 151
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 148
Seating Positions ...................................... 150
Child Safety Locks ...........................................28
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 311
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 305
Windshield Wiper Blades .......................... 276
Climate Control ................................................48
Automatic ....................................................52
Manual ........................................................48
Coin Holder ......................................................71
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 164
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 300
Computer, Trip/Travel ......................................87
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......... 392
Console ............................................................71
Floor ............................................................71
Contract, Service ........................................... 402
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 283
Cooling System ............................................. 281
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 282
Coolant Level ...................................281 , 283
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 314
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 283
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 281
Inspection ................................................. 283
Points To Remember ................................ 283
Pressure Cap ............................................ 283
Radiator Cap ............................................. 283
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....281, 314
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 305
Cruise Light ...............................................96 , 97
Cupholders.......................................................71
Customer Assistance .................................... 401
Cybersecurity ................................................ 316
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
407
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 42
Dealer Service ...............................................273
Defroster, Windshield ....................................159
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 98
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................................................... 42
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................272
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................264
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................283
Disturb...........................................................368
Do Not Disturb ...............................................398
Door Ajar................................................... 89 , 90
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 89 , 90
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 30
Driving ...........................................................224
E
Easy Entry Seats .............................................. 34
Electric Brake Control System .......................101
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................100
Traction Control System ............................101
Electric Parking Brake ...................................166
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................71
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......186
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................103
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 89
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 261
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher
........................... 227
Jacking ............................................ 248 , 286
Jump Starting ........................................... 258
Tow Hooks ................................................ 265
Towing ...................................................... 264
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........99
Engine........................................................... 271
Air Cleaner ................................................ 274
Block Heater ............................................. 165
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 166
Checking Oil Level .................................... 272
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 314
Cooling ..................................................... 281
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 158 , 313
Fails To Start ............................................ 164
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 164
Jump Starting ........................................... 258
Oil .................................................... 273 , 314
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 271 , 274
Oil Filter .................................................... 274
Oil Selection .................................... 274 , 314
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 274
Overheating .............................................. 261
Starting..................................................... 162
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 274
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ............................. 274
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 142 , 266
Ethanol.......................................................... 312
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 158 , 313
Exhaust System ...................................158 , 279
Exterior Lighting ...............................................42
Exterior Lights ........................................ 42 , 161
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 386
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 274
Air Conditioning ................................. 60 , 275
Engine Oil ........................................274 , 314
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 274
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 227
Turn Signals ......................... 42 , 44, 96, 161
Flash-To-Pass ............................................42 , 43
Flat Tire Changing ................................ 286 , 300
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 286 , 300
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 164
Floor Console ...................................................71
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 314
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 161
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................ 284
Engine Oil ................................................. 272
11
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408
Fluid, Brake
...................................................315
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................314
Fog Lights ................................................. 42 , 44
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 30
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 32
Forward Collision Warning .............................114
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................263
Fuel ...............................................................311
Additives ...................................................312
Clean Air ....................................................311
Ethanol ......................................................312
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...................................213
Gasoline ....................................................311
Light ............................................................ 92
Materials Added ........................................312
Methanol ...................................................312
Octane Rating ................................. 311 , 314
Specifications ............................................314
Tank Capacity ............................................314
Fuses .............................................................241
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................213
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................311
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................311
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................311
Gear Ranges ........................................ 171 , 175
Gear Selector Override ..................................262
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 309
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 216
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 216
GVWR............................................................ 214
H
Hazard Warning Flashers
.............................. 227
Head Restraints ...............................................36
Head Rests ......................................................36
Headlights .......................................................42
Automatic ....................................................43
Cleaning ................................................... 306
Delay ...........................................................43
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........42
Lights On Reminder ..............................42 , 43
Passing .................................................42 , 43
Switch..........................................................42
Time Delay............................................42 , 43
Heated Mirrors ..........................................39 , 41
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 165
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
..............................................................42
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 106
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 106
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 107
Holder, Coin .....................................................71
Holder, Cup ......................................................71
Hood Prop ........................................................65
Hood Release ..................................................65
I
Ignition .............................................................16
Switch ..........................................................16
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide
......................................11
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 39 , 227
Instrument Cluster .............................75 , 77, 79
Descriptions.................................................96
Display ..................................................78 , 80
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 309
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 308
Interior Fuses ................................................ 245
Interior Lights ...................................................45
Introduction .......................................................8
Inverter
Power
...........................................................73
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ........................ 352 , 392
J
Jack Location
................................................ 248
Jack Operation ............................248 , 249, 286
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 249
Jump Starting ................................................ 258
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm
.............................................22
Disarm The Alarm ........................................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........15, 21
Remote Keyless Entry ..................................12
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
409
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ............................................................... 15
Key-In Reminder .............................................. 17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ................................... 12 , 24
Keys................................................................. 12
Replacement ........................................ 15 , 21
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
................. 42, 44
Lane Change Assist .................................. 42 , 44
LaneSense ....................................................207
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................123
Latches..........................................................161
Hood ........................................................... 65
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................161
Life Of Tires ...................................................298
Liftgate ..................................................... 66 , 67
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 47
Light Bulbs.....................................................161
Lights.............................................................161
Air Bag............................................. 131 , 159
Automatic Headlights .................................. 43
Battery Saver............................................... 44
Brake Assist Warning ................................105
Brake Warning ............................................ 88
Bulb Replacement .....................................232
Cruise ................................................... 96 , 97
Daytime Running ......................................... 42
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................42
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator
..................................................90
Exterior ..................................................... 161
Fog ..............................................................44
Headlight Switch ..........................................42
Headlights ...................................................42
High Beam ...................................................42
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................42
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 106
Instrument Cluster .......................................42
Intensity Control ..........................................45
Interior.........................................................45
Lights On Reminder ..............................42 , 43
Low Fuel ......................................................92
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........93
Park .............................................................96
Passing .................................................42 , 43
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................90
Security Alarm .............................................91
Service ..................................................... 232
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 116
Traction Control ........................................ 105
Turn Signals .........................42 , 44, 96, 161
Vanity Mirror ................................................41
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................90 , 96
Load Floor, Cargo .............................................68
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .......................86
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................86
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............86
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............86
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 214
Tires.......................................................... 292
Locks
Auto Unlock .................................................28
Child Protection ...........................................28
Power Door ..................................................24
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 116
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 276
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 310
Luggage Carrier ................................................74
M
Maintenance ....................................................65
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 272
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 267
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....93
Manual
Service ...................................................... 404
Manual Transmission ........................... 170 , 285
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 285
Frequency Of Fluid Change ....................... 285
Lubricant Selection ................................... 285
Shift Speeds ............................................. 171
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................28
Memory Seat ....................................................28
Memory Settings ..............................................28
11
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410
Methanol
.......................................................312
Mini-Trip Computer .......................................... 87
Mirrors ............................................................. 39
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 39
Heated ................................................. 39 , 41
Outside................................................. 39 , 40
Rearview ............................................39 , 227
Vanity .......................................................... 41
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................116
Mopar Parts ...................................................403
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 42
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................166
O
Occupant Restraints
......................................121
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 311, 314
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................274
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................274
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 90
Oil, Engine ........................................... 273 , 314
Capacity ....................................................314
Change Interval .........................................273
Checking ...................................................272
Dipstick .....................................................272
Disposal ................................................... 274
Filter ................................................ 274 , 314
Filter Disposal ........................................... 274
Identification Logo .................................... 274
Materials Added To .................................. 274
Pressure Warning Light ...............................90
Recommendation ............................ 274 , 314
Synthetic .................................................. 274
Viscosity .......................................... 274 , 314
Onboard Diagnostic System .............................98
Operating Precautions .....................................98
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
.................................... 9 , 404
Outlet
Power
..........................................................71
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................39 , 40
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 261
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ................... 9
P
Paddle Shifters ............................................. 178
Paint Care ..................................................... 305
Parking Brake ............................................... 166
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 202
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 370
Pets .............................................................. 158
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 292
Power
Door Locks ...................................................24
Inverter ........................................................73
Liftgate ........................................................67
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................71
Sunroof ........................................................62
Windows ......................................................60
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 128
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 249
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 128
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 297
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 283
Radio
Presets
..................................................... 345
Radio Operation ...................................344 , 393
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 392
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................47
Rear Camera ................................................. 212
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 112
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 202
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................................32
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................47
Recreational Towing ...................................... 223
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 311
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
411
Refrigerant
....................................................275
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................372
Release, Hood ................................................. 65
Reminder, Lights On ................................. 42 , 43
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................122
Remote Control
Starting System ........................................... 18
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .... 380 , 388
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ................383
Remote Features, Starting .................. 382 , 391
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................12
Arm The Alarm ............................................. 22
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 15, 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........392
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 19
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features.................................................. 19
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19
Remote Starting System .................................. 18
Removing SiriusXM Guardian ........................386
Replacement Keys .................................... 15 , 21
Replacement Tires .........................................298
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................403
Restraints, Child ............................................146
Restraints, Head .............................................. 36
Roadside Assistance ........................... 376 , 387
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier .............................................74
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 302
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 159
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 161
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 403
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 286
Safety Tips .................................................... 158
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 158
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 267
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................90
Seat Belts ............................................ 122 , 159
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 126
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 126
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 126
Child Restraints ........................................ 146
Energy Management Feature ................... 129
Extender ................................................... 128
Front Seat...............................122 , 123, 124
Inspection................................................. 159
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 124
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 125
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 123
Operating Instructions .............................. 124
Pregnant Women ...................................... 128
Pretensioners ........................................... 128
Rear Seat.................................................. 123
Reminder .................................................. 122
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 128
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 128
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 125
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 308
Seats................................................................30
Adjustment ..................................................30
Easy Entry ....................................................34
Head Restraints ...........................................36
Heated .........................................................35
Memory .......................................................28
Rear Folding .........................................30 , 32
Seatback Release ........................................32
Tilting ...........................................................30
Ventilated ....................................................36
Security Alarm ...........................................22 , 91
Arm The System ...........................................22
Disarm The System ......................................23
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 314
Send & Go ............................................377 , 387
Sentry Key
Key Programming
........................................21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................20
Sentry Key Replacement ...........................15 , 21
Service Assistance ........................................ 401
Service Contract ............................................ 402
Service Manuals ........................................... 404
11
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412
Shift Lever Override
.......................................262
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
............................174
Manual Transmission ................................170
Shoulder Belts ...............................................123
Side View Mirror Adjustment .................... 39 , 40
Signals, Turn .............................42 , 44, 96, 161
Siri .................................................................398
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................346
Favorites ...................................................348
Replay .......................................................347
SiriusXM Guardian FAQ .................................387
SiriusXM Guardian Trial Period ......................371
SiriusXM Guardian, Getting Started ...............372
SiriusXM Guardian, Introduction ....................370
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ..........................................348
Favorites ...................................................348
Replay .......................................................347
Smart Watch ..................................................386
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................301
Snow Tires .....................................................300
SOS Call............................................... 373 , 387
Spare Tires .......................................... 300 , 301
Spark Plugs ...................................................314
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................314
Oil..............................................................314
Speed Control
Cancel ...................................................... 188
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...................... 188
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........................... 188
Resume .................................................... 188
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 186
Starting ...................................................18 , 162
Automatic Transmission ........................... 163
Button .........................................................16
Cold Weather ............................................ 164
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 164
Remote........................................................18
Starting And Operating .................................. 162
Starting Procedures ...................................... 162
Steering
Column Controls
..........................................42
Tilt Column ..................................................38
Wheel, Heated .............................................38
Wheel, Tilt....................................................38
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 392
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ........................................................ 392
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ............................. 379
Storage ............................................................70
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................59
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 345
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 263
Sun Roof ...................................................62 , 65
Sun Visor..........................................................41
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 132
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 109
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 274
System, Remote Starting .................................18
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................38
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............58
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .............................68 , 69
Tilt Steering Column .........................................38
Time Delay
Headlight ..............................................42 , 43
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 292
Tire Markings ................................................ 287
Tire Safety Information .................................. 286
Tire Service Kit .............................................. 253
Tires .................................. 161 , 295, 300, 303
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 298
Air Pressure .............................................. 295
Chains ...................................................... 301
Changing .........................................248 , 286
Compact Spare ......................................... 300
General Information ........................ 295 , 300
High Speed ............................................... 296
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
413
Inflation Pressure
......................................296
Jacking ............................................ 248 , 286
Life Of Tires ...............................................298
Load Capacity ............................................292
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
...............................93 , 116
Quality Grading ..........................................303
Radial ........................................................297
Replacement .............................................298
Rotation ....................................................302
Safety .............................................. 286 , 295
Sizes..........................................................288
Snow Tires .................................................300
Spare Tires ...................................... 300 , 301
Spinning ....................................................297
Trailer Towing ............................................220
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................298
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................310
To Open Hood .................................................. 65
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................219
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................................................265
Towing ...........................................................216
Disabled Vehicle ........................................264
Guide.........................................................218
Recreational ..............................................223
Weight .......................................................218
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 223
Traction Control ............................................ 101
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 109
Trailer Towing ............................................... 216
Cooling System Tips ................................. 222
Minimum Requirements ........................... 219
Tips........................................................... 222
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 219
Wiring ....................................................... 221
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 218
Trailer Weight ................................................ 218
Transaxle
Automatic
................................................. 173
Operation ................................................. 173
Transfer Case
Fluid
......................................................... 315
Transmission ................................................ 174
Automatic ........................................ 174 , 285
Fluid ......................................................... 315
Maintenance ............................................ 285
Manual ..................................................... 170
Transporting Pets .......................................... 158
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 298
Turn Signals ....................................... 42 , 44, 96
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
................... 369
Phone Call Features ................................. 366
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 369
Uconnect Settings .......................................19
Uconnect App ................................................ 372
Uconnect Phone ................ 361, 362, 363, 364
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 367
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 367
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 370
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ........... 366
Call Continuation .............................368 , 369
Call Controls ............................................. 367
Call Termination ....................................... 368
Cancel Command ..................................... 362
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
The Uconnect Phone And
Mobile Phone
....................................... 369
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................ 364
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ............ 365
11
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414
Dial By Saying A Number
...........................366
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ...364
Far End Audio Performance ......................370
Help Command .........................................362
Join Calls ...................................................368
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite .................................................365
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress .................................368
Managing Your Favorites ...........................366
Natural Speech .........................................361
Operation ..................................................361
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ........................................362
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ....364
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ..................363
Phonebook Download ...............................365
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............368
Power-Up ...................................................370
Recent Calls ..............................................367
Redial ........................................................368
To Remove A Favorite ...............................366
Toggling Between Calls .............................368
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................367
Transfer Call To And From
Mobile Phone
........................................369
Voice Command ........................................369
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ....................366
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .............19
Uconnect Voice Command ............................ 394
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 303
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
..................................................... 392
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 125
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................41
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 378 , 388
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 385
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 384
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 310
Vehicle Loading ................................... 214 , 292
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 385
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................22
Vehicle Storage ................................................59
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................11
Navigation ...................................................11
Operating Instructions .................................11
Searching User Guide ..................................11
Ventilated Seats ..............................................36
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 274
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 394
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
....................................................92
Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Warnings, Roll Over ............................................ 9
Warranty Information .................................... 403
Washers, Windshield ............................. 46 , 272
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 307
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 305
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 305
Wi-fi............................................................... 378
Wind Buffeting ..........................................62 , 65
Window Fogging ...............................................59
Windows ..........................................................60
Close............................................................60
Down ...........................................................60
Open ............................................................60
Power...........................................................60
Up ................................................................60
Windshield Defroster .................................... 159
Windshield Washers .............................. 46 , 272
Fluid.......................................................... 272
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 276
Windshield Wipers ...........................................46
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 276
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................47
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2020 COMPASS
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_MP_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2020 COMPASS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
